Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 .

2 .

You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. 3 . including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. such as duct. and plumbing engineering workflows. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add more detailed modelling elements. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical panels. Germany. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and piping. such as mechanical equipment.

However. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. annotations. is located and accessed in the training files location. when you add ductwork. NOTE Depending on your installation. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. views. You do not design entire systems. you can choose to save your work. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. as well as how to open and save them. After completing each exercise. templates. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Metric: files for users working with metric units. In this exercise. When you open a training file. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and sheets to document the project. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. your Training folder may be in a different location. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create schedules. Contact your CAD manager for more information. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. When you install the training files as instructed. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. and tags. On the Contents tab. So. Metric file names have an _m suffix.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. For example. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. however. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you learn where the training files are located. to provide a richer and more finished design. such as templates and families. For example.

and click Save. For Files of type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. You may close the file with or without saving changes. scroll down. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 4 Click the training file name. click ➤ Save As.rvt) is selected.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt. For example. 3 In the right pane. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. select the folder in which to save the new file. For File name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. if you open settings. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click the Training Files icon.rvt and make changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. double-click Imperial or Metric. you are prompted to save the changes. enter the new file name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and you can open any supported file type. and click Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Open dialog displays.

6 .

These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In the Revit MEP model. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. hence. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. sections. the floor or roof remains connected. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. quantities. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In this case. 2D and 3D view. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. scope. and plans. If you move the partition. ■ ■ 7 . every drawing sheet. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. You learn the terminology. schedules. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. drawings. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is one of association or connection. As you work in drawing and schedule views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson.

■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. grids. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. For example. sinks. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. ducts. sinks. and electrical panels.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. sprinklers. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. and electrical panels. ducts. For example. filled regions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. boilers. and 2D detail components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and reference planes are datum elements. boilers. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Datum elements help to define project context. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. levels. Examples include detail lines. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. When you change something. dimensions. tags. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. walls and ceilings are hosts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

such as roofs. For example. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. first floor. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. families. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Project: In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. schedules. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. views of the project. However. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you can explicitly control them. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. In other cases. elevation views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you must be in a section or elevation view. If you can draw. top of wall. and drawings of the design. By using a single project file. from geometry to construction data. programming is not required. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Often. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. To place levels. and types. The project file contains all information for the building design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Most often. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. and so forth). for example. section views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. North . floors. you do nothing to establish these relationships.Elevation View Element: When creating a project.

10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. identical use. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. pipes. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Then experiment with them. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. However. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. For example. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families include ducts. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and wires. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A type can be a specific size of a family. A type can also be a style. and similar graphical representation. With a few clicks. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can also display several project views at one time. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. hiding. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. showing.

To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

and CAD files. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and settings. and for switching views. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. select the tool first.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. architect-specific tools. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. then select what you want to modify. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems.

click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. For example. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides requested information. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). when adding duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. displays frequently used tools.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. select a file to open. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click.. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish..

click. annotation.. and Walkthrough. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 ... but is not enabled by default.. or template file. annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. provides views including Default 3D. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. to. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family. family.On the application menu. saves a current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Print) access product and license information. or template file. publish the current project. (Licensing) close the file. To enable or disable a tool item. (Publish) print the current drawing. Camera.

Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. In addition. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. To hide the Status Bar. or the Family Editor. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. check the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. repeat the command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. when you switch to another editing mode. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. When you are highlighting an element or component. This displays the command history in a list. To show the Status Bar again. workshared components. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Starting with the most recent command. Modify. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. Clipboard. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Group. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.To undo or redo a series of operations. However. Clear the Status Bar check mark. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.

Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. click (Modify). It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. select one or more elements of the same category. for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. For example. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. Zoom the view In the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. click Training Files.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. When you release the mouse button. 6 Click in the drawing area. click . To modify or add snap increments. In the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 To display SteeringWheels. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. on the Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms in on the selected area. Modifying the View | 19 . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.

13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. and click tin the Options dialog. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 14 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. called drag controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display along the ends. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . bottoms. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and open Level 2 . After you are familiar with these tasks. as shown. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. select the first item in the list. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The duct is moved to the new position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and drag it to the left as shown.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. as shown. Some commands. 11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case. such as Move and Copy. for example.

such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Click OK. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply.End a command Some commands. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. For example. 13 To end a command. 14 Enter VG. Select Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

link files. You can choose from several templates. click Training files. New projects inherit all the families. You can either select a template from the template library. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. Finally. system families. settings. and click Open. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as ducts and pipes. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as coordination review and interference checking. the default building levels and standard views. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.rte template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. create and manage views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. use copy/monitor. In that case. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Browse. under Template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 27 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as the default project units and settings. and loadable families. under Create new. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 6 Click OK. and modify system settings.

rte template and click Open. For Location. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. Click OK twice. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. (Browse). 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. create another new project using the Construction template. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Manchester. under Energy Analysis. Click OK. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. NH. When you select the material. navigate to Imperial Templates. for Energy Data. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click Edit. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. In the Choose Template dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. For example. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project template. click (Browse). 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. you can select it now. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. for City. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. Click Cancel.7 In the Project Browser. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. and open North. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. ■ ■ Under Create new. click Browse. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. ■ For Building Construction. select School or University. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Level 1.

for 3/4". plumbing. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. wiring. click Sizes. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and fire protection systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 4 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Views. 27 Click OK. for 3 1/2". 26 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 25 In the left pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. 10 1/2". 22 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. and 12 1/2". click Wiring. 23 In the left pane.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Holding CTRL. 33 Click OK. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Round. and demand factors for electrical systems.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 24 In the right pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 11 1/2". and 5 1/2". select Identity Data.rfa and click Open. under Duct Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . After standard settings have been established for an organization. Click OK twice. 5 1/2". piping. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. For Categories. for 3 1/2". click Rectangular.

For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. In addition. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 38 Close the file. From the Positioning list. select Sub-Discipline. sheets. 4 In the New Project dialog.Origin to Origin. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 5 Click OK. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Family and Type. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select View Name. For Sort by. select Associated Level. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. Notice that the file is saved as a template.rvt. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You need to create the MEP model for the project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. families. and groups that are contained in a project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. select Auto . Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. For Then by. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Template file. select Project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Click Open. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Linking Projects In this exercise. To enable this coordination. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. under Create new. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and select it as the library path. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click (Browse). TIP You may want to create a new folder first.11 In the Places dialog. 15 Under Library Name. and click OK twice. or families. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click (Add Value). and change the name to My Library. Load. click My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click the My Library icon. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Save. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Import dialogs. ➤ Open. templates. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 19 Click Cancel. (Remove Value) to delete the library. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . If you work in a large office. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 11 In the Options dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Edit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 On the File Locations tab. click the Spelling tab. such as bump maps. 22 Select My Library. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Click in the drawing area. This path is determined during installation. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 2 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 20 Click ➤ Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 27 Click OK. click Places. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 3 Under Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the text editor.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. custom color files. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 5 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. If you want to relocate this path. and decal image files. select Ignore words in uppercase. view the current path.

. You can turn snap settings on and off. you modify snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap settings. and enter 1 . 19 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Close. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click Edit. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 20 Under Settings. click Training Files. 24 In the Options dialog. click OK. click the Spelling tab. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . under Template file. under Dimension Snaps. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 2 In the New Project dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte. 25 Close the file without saving it. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Restore Defaults. 23 In the text editor. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click OK.17 In the Spelling dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog.

7 Under Object Snaps. This is the increment that you added previously. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom out until it does so. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. For example. TIP To zoom while sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. While sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. deselect Chain.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. it will snap to the endpoints. 25 Click OK. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 26 Close the file. and delete the value 1’ . and move the cursor to the right. Notice that snapping is once again active. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the midpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. with or without saving it. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 22 Move the cursor downward. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and the wall edges. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Enter SM.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building. go to http://www. At the end of the tutorial.autodesk. duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After applying a color scheme to the zones. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this lesson. By following the recommended workflow. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first configure the linked architectural model. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After finishing each exercise. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. 45 . However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you create a plenum level. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you first plan the system. water source heat pump (WSHP). This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.

Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you add a level for plenums. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. In this section. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it.rvt. ceilings. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. and click OK. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. These components are defined in the architectural training file. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and after the linked model highlights. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. click Training Files. select Room Bounding. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 1 In the Project Browser.

For Offset. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and in the Plan View Types dialog. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 8'. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Click Plan View Types.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).6 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Draw panel. 16 Press Esc. and double-click West . 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and click OK.MEP. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. Preparing Spaces | 47 . The new level is placed. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).

■ Click OK twice. click Edit. enter an Offset of 1' 0". and click Apply Default View Template. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Identity Data. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Properties. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for View Scale. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Top. select Design. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under View Depth. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select MEP . for Default View Template. select Plenum Plan. enter 0. for Level. For Sub-Discipline. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In this exercise.Plenum. select Level Above (Level 3). They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Under Extents. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you can choose to save your work. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for View Range. and for Offset. 20 In the Project Browser. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In the next exercise. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE After finishing each exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For Cut plane. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. For View Classification. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. walls. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select New. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Space. enter 0.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2 Plenum. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceilings). select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). For Offset. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. click Training Files.

10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 219. 14 In the drawing area. enter Library.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ensuring coordination between the files. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.7 Click to place the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. for Number. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 9 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 . 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. and for Offset. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Level 3. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Upper Limit. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and then press Esc. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted.

as shown. which was numbered 219Q. 10 Using the same method. enter Corridor. In the schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and press Enter. change the space number to 216A. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. double-click the space name. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 9 In the floor plan.7 In the Project Browser. 11 Close the schedule view. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.rvt. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click Training Files. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. you place a space in a chase. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

enter Chase. enter 225PC. 12 Click in the section view. and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click in the chase area to place the space.4 Press Esc. For Offset. 10 In the plan view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. for Upper Limit. select Roof Level. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. and then click OK. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Number. for Name. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. enter 0. On the Options Bar. In the plan view. right-click. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. expand Spaces. select Interior and Reference. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select the space. Under Identity Data. enter 4'. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints.

Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. select Space Tag With Volume. In the next exercises. under Loaded Tags. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Bounding elements (such as walls. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 17 Type ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. floors. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. ceilings.Space Plan. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. and maximize the view. 15 Press Esc. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. All spaces in the view are tagged. and click OK.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Reference. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. which removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise. click Training Files. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.rvt. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). To display space reference lines. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. click View ➤ Zones. After a space is placed in an area. 1 In the Project Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. under Spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

you can add or remove a space from the zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. select Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. Using the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces to zones in the building. The Zone tool is active. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.Zoning is highlighted. the Edit Zone tab displays. indicating that it’s the active view.5 In the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i.rvt. double-click 121 Cafeteria. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. As you do this. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 4 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. under Spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. select Occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces to a zone. Instruction 221. and a new zone is created. Next. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and click Finish Editing Zone. and modify the zone properties. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. indicating that the space is occupiable. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference.

6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 5 With the drawing area active.In the System Browser. type VG. select HVAC Zones. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. for Name.rvt. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. You activated zone visibility in the views.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Identity Data. enter 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning. 11 Close the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces.Area B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click OK. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. expand 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 9 In the System Browser.West . To display space reference lines. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.West . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference.

15 Press Esc. 8 In the Level 1 . zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning view. Select Attached End.Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning floor plan. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click in the Level 2 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.

and click OK. on the ViewCube. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Front. for Name Value. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. enter Lounge . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.East. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. space. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. click the corner where the Top. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and zone information. you verify the building. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.Zoning view. double-click Level 1 . double-click the zone tag. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.

Next. click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Click (Highlight). you isolate the space. With 109 Lounge selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.

For Electrical Loads. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Construction Type. and click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. select 1_South_Lounge. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. ■ ■ ■ Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For People. select Lounge/Recreation. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. the space information displays for the selected space. click . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the People dialog.■ On the Details tab. scroll down in the left pane. Next. and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog.

View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. cooling air temperature. and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. floors.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For Cooling Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Next. roofs. verify that 70. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. For Heating Information. verify that 74. outdoor air per area.00 °F : 54. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and other room-bounding components. and air changes per hour.00 °F : 90. click (Shading). 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. heating air temperature. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This indicates the heating set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. the zone information displays for the selected zone. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.

Because this is an unoccupied space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Level 3. For Offset. Under Energy Analysis. Under Energy Analysis. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum. open MEP . select Plenum. click Cancel. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 0. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Name. enter 212P. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. for Number.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

For Postal Code. enter 03101. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise.rvt. and select space Plenum 212P.Space Plan. On the Place tab. double-click Level 2 . space. NH. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. is selected. select School or University. For Location. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. click Training Files. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . In this exercise. click Edit. and zone information. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. you verified building. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click in the Value field. for City. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that the space has replaced the void. verify that Manchester.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

and enter 50 sq. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Sensible. verify that Occupiable is selected. for Building Service. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For People. ■ On the Weather tab. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select Specified. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. a cooling load. For Condition Type. under Volume Computations. click Edit. Click OK twice. for Values. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. If. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. right-click. For Space Type. you need to select this option. For Latent. and then click . or neither. verify that <Building> is specified. select space Library 219. For Export Complexity. For Building Construction. For Project Phase. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. both. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that New Construction is selected. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. this option adjusts the times automatically. click in the Value column. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. enter 150 Btu/h. enter 200 Btu/h. and click OK. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Ground Plane. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. ft. select Library . In order to select a space. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select Specified. select Heated and cooled. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Select Area per person. verify that Level 1 is selected. and click OK.Audio Visual.

You have verified the building information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . verify that <Building> is specified. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Location. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. for Values.■ ■ ■ Click OK. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and under Heating Information. verify that Manchester. and can be modified here. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. click Information). There should be no warnings displayed. select 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. click Calculate. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. Select the space associated with the warning. You should correct the space error in the building model. NH. verify that School or University is selected. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. select Actual. Click OK twice. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. For Building Service. Under Power. Next. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Building Construction. select Actual. click Edit. for Values. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library.

18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . Notice that the space information was automatically updated. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. click Training Files. and zone information for the building model. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. space. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 15 Review the loads report for project. 17 In the loads report. weather. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 3 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. select 219 Library. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or make any changes to the model. For Color Scheme. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. In this exercise. select HVAC Zones. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.rvt. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under Energy Analysis. or zone information.Space Plan. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 19 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 After you review the loads report.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 21 Click OK. and a loads report displays. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. under Schemes. in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.

11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

For Phase. more category options are available.rvt. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . select Spaces. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. select Spaces. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. for Select available fields from. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise.Space Fill is the active view.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. select New Construction. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select Schedule building components. For Name. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. click Training Files. enter Space Airflow Schedule.

For Type.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. and then click . In the Schedule Properties dialog. and Blank line. select Number. and then click Conditional Format. select Level. and click OK. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Level. For Formula.■ Under Available fields. Select Formula. for Formula. select Not Between. Header. Click OK. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Airflow Delta. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Air Flow. In the Fields dialog. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Select Ascending. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select HVAC. For Then by. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. click (Browse). enter . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. ■ Click Calculated Value. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Discipline.

click the color swatch. right-click to access schedule properties. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Click OK twice. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Under Conditions to Use. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Background Color. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays. select red. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In later exercises. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text.■ ■ ■ For Value. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the Color dialog. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. verify that Show is highlighted.

78 .

In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Then.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. As you place the air terminals. 79 .

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. the space crossing lines display. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. click Training Files. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view.

Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and select Supply Diffuser . enter 425 CFM. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. verify that Constrain is cleared. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. as shown. 9 On the Placement panel. type 12. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple.Rectangular Face Round Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Also.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. which in this case is the ceiling grid. click Place on Face. for Flow. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and press Enter.

as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes. 28 On the Placement tab. and then press Esc. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. and click Open. As you place the return diffusers. click Place on Face. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser .rfa. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Next. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 25 In the drawing area. 22 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Open dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.

36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click OK. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . enter 9' 0"2750. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. for Constraints ➤ Offset. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. For the start point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

After creating the logical connection. In this exercise.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. When you highlight a space.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .Press Esc. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. click Training Files. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and click View ➤ Systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. including energy analysis. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the title. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You then create the logical connection between the system components. However. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.

9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Connect Into. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. As you add diffusers to systems. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and Flow value. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. On the Options Bar. 15 Click Cancel. the number of elements is updated. review the Number of Elements. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.

You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 25 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.17 Using the method learned previously. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. the air terminals are the children. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 18 Click OK. under Identity Data. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and the system connects them. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. under Mechanical. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 22 Click OK. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. for Mark. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. for System Name.

rvt. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Also. select the upper left diffuser. for Solution Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Network type provides several solutions. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . which provides various layout tools. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. In this case.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area. select Network. indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Training Files. and display solution 1.

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. Click OK. you’ll get an error in a later step. Select Branch. click Modify. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 9' 10 1/2". 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.7 On the Options Bar. enter 3'. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Duct Type.Round. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Settings.

select a different layout solution. For example. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Usually. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click to select it. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. The first time you press Tab.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select Duct Color Fill . for Values Displayed. and click OK. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. fittings. for Color Scheme. under Graphics. and then click OK. but not all values are used in this view. and equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. select By View. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.Flow. If the entire network does not highlight.

The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.Velocity. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 20 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes. and on the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers in the system. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . select the WSHP. for Flow. under Mechanical . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and press Enter. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Airflow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.

press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and select 16". and then click to select it. select Friction. Select Only. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and drag it to the right. Under Constraints. and enter . highlight a segment of the duct.08 in-wg/100ft. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select the upper segment of main duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. Select Restrict Height. click Cancel.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Branch Sizing.

30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Using this tool. and pressure loss. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 35 Click Finish. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system.rvt. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted.

Front. select the top right diffuser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click MEP .3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2". click the corner where the Top. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 15 On the ViewCube. NOTE When drawing duct. and click Draw Duct.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 22 Using the same method.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Also. The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Restrict Height.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and then click OK.Airflow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. such as a plenum. under Constraints. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct. for Flow.

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . Create return and supply piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. In this lesson. Then.

Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you place mechanical equipment.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.High Efficiency . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP . as shown.2-6 Tons . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Horizontal .Left Return . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Wall faces is selected. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. in corridor 328.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

click the dimension. and enter 2'. as shown. and click to place the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector.8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 10 Select the WSHP. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.

for Water Flow. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs. enter 12 GPM.14 Click Modify. for Offset. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 9'. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.21 Click Modify. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components.

HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. right-click the Systems column heading. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . but without a corresponding system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click View ➤ Piping. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files.Mech 330). where it is easier to review the information. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted. Creating a Piping System | 115 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Unlike logical connections (systems). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You can create pipes to connect system components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . analyses cannot be performed.rvt. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

This display indicates that the system is selected. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. As you assign equipment to systems. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. while pressing Ctrl. select the boiler. for System Name. 12 In the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system.In the System Browser. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. and the Edit System tool is not active. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that on the Options Bar.

double-click Roof . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.Design.HVAC Plan . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 17 On the Options Bar. for System Name.13 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Creating a Piping System | 117 .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 19 In the Project Browser.

23 Close the roof plan view.22 In the Select Connector dialog. In heating mode. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and bypasses the cooling tower. 29 Right-click CHWS. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. expand the Hydronic Return system category. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In cooling mode. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 25 Select the boiler. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click Select. and click OK. indicating the logical connection. 28 Using the same method.

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. and click Properties. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. under Mechanical. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click OK.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Column Settings. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. you can place the cursor over a system component. press Tab to highlight the system.HVAC Plan . When you draw a box to select components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 10 Click OK. and click to select it. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the Select a System dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. A system preview displays in red. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). then the Select a System dialog displays.rvt.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 5 In the Filter dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design is highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). select Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Check None. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. the boiler. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. select CHWR.Mech 330). click Training Files.

14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . or architectural components. verify that Solutions is selected. For Inset.11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. enter 1' 6''. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. click Settings. select Perimeter. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 13 Click Cancel.

to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 17 Optionally. With each Tab. and the flow for the other is 12. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.

Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler. under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . you physically close the CHWR loop. Logically. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 32 Click Finish Editing System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. which propagates flow throughout the system. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. Next.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 38 Using the same method. select a WSHP. and click Cancel. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. under Mechanical. as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. access its instance properties. 35 Using the drag control.

40 In the Select a System dialog. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 0''/12''. For Slope. enter 1' 6''. Click Settings. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Inset. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. 41 Click OK. select CHWS. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.

and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. as shown. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

Add piping to close the supply loop. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 Using the same method. To create the piping system. or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.rvt.Design is highlighted. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and the return pipes are magenta. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. as shown.HVAC Plan . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . As you work in the training file. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection.

and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. select the boiler.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 13 In the plan view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and you select 1 connector.In a plan view. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.7''. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2'. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and press Enter. for Offset. enter 1' . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. as shown. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and select it. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 19 In the plan view. 18 Press Esc twice. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

and when the connector point displays. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. click to connect to the pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 28 Press Esc. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. you select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. right-click the bottom connector.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'.

these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

■ ■ On the Options Bar.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next. you validate the flow through the system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. right-click.

the value is 0 GPM. When you create the pumps in parallel. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 41 Using the same method. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click OK. notice that Flow is 125 GPM.50 or 50% of the Flow. 40 Click Cancel. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 44 In the 3D view. In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). select the cooling tower. right-click. 48 In the plan view. 46 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next. The flow is being propagated through the piping. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. notice that under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog.39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

the water bypasses the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and close the dialog.50 In the 3D View. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. Adding Valves In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. select the cooling tower. When the valve is open. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

Design is highlighted.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Press Esc twice. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and select Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 143 .HVAC Plan . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 4 On the Options Bar.

parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). under Mechanical. 20 Select the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and click Element Properties.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. Adding Valves | 145 . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 19 Using the same method. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. In heating mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click OK.

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. as shown. Initially.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. click Training Files.

for Schemes.Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. Sizing Pipe | 147 . select Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

and for Velocity. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 2. Select And. enter 5 FPS. Click OK. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and click to select the branch.25 FT/100ft. Under Constraints. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing.

rvt. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System In this exercise. pressure. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. or manually modify the pipe. Inspecting the System | 149 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. click Training Files.

and pressure information including pressure loss. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .89 psi. as shown. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Using the same method. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and to size pipe. you need to validate them.88 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 10 Click Finish. inspect Section 6 again. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. for Fluid Temperature. select 90° F.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.67 psi. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. In this exercise. and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). right-click the Systems titlebar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. thus assigning the components to a system. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and click Show to view all of the system components.Design.rvt. the pipe is associated with that system. and double-click Level 3 . and for pipe sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. If you place components without assigning them to a system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you have assigned all components to systems. For example. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. double-click Level 1 .HVAC Plan . Warnings display. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and click View.Design ➤ Floor Plans. As you learned when placing components. After you assign components to a system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 6 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 4 In the System Browser.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Hydronic Return. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. otherwise. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and select Level 3 . 10 Using the same methods. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. expand the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and confirm unassigned system components.HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting.

expand Wiring . and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. For Material. Click OK. ■ ■ For Material. For Temperature. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In this exercise you review electrical settings.rvt.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Correction Factor. As you place components and create circuits. enter THHN. enter 1. select 75. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click Training Files. and demand factors that are applied in the design. wiring. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper. distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Temperature Rating. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. speeding up the design phase. select 90. click (Open). 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ For Factor. You also add a wiring type. select Copper.Wire Sizes.04. select Wiring Types.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

First. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. power circuits. Create a panel schedule. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . Create power loads. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.

2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category. select the color legend. select the color for Less Than 20. In the Color dialog. click Training Files.00 fc.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK. You can create additional color schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. for Basic Colors. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting Color Fill view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.00 fc. click (Open). select Orange. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.

The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.5 fc range.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.7 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range is satisfied. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .Lighting Ceiling plan. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 8 In the Project Browser. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once the +/. zoom to space Library 219.277. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .

24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 23 Click OK. select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. the fixtures will move accordingly. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.

select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

click Check None. Click OK.277V.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category. select Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . 36 In the Filter dialog.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. The lighting delta is satisfied.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the drawing area.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. you modify the light fixture IES files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 Tile the views as shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Plan.

enter . enter F15. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .93.00 VA. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ Click Apply. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor.ies and click Open. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Identity Data. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the Name dialog. enter . Under Photometrics.00 lm. for Color Preset. click the value for Initial Intensity.85. ■ Under Photometrics. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. and click OK. specify 15000. for Type Mark.277V and click OK. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. select Luminous Flux. for Lamp. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . for Ballast Loss Factor. select 463T5_S. Click OK. In the Select File dialog. enter 162. for Apparent Load. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ Click OK twice. select Xenon and click OK. select T5 [HO]. Under Electrical. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Initial Color. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. select Lighting Fixtures.277V.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. junction boxes. and receptacles to your design. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the drawing area. you add switches. Placing Switches. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.Press Delete. and Receptacles | 183 . Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Junction Boxes. click (Open). Placing Switches. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. The element type Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Select Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches.NoLoad. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

NOTE When entering values. enter JB-1NL. 15 Select the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. Click Edit Type. 21 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note the Number of Poles is 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Level 2 . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click OK twice. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter 9’0”. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Electrical. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Offset. zoom to space Library 219.

Expand General. and Voltage. right-click and click Column Settings. Distribution System. Expand Electrical. 24 For any column. Select Load. Placing Switches. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 23 In the System Browser. Space Number. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. Click OK. 26 In the System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Junction Boxes. and Number of Elements. NOTE If necessary. and Receptacles | 187 . Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down.

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area.

13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 8 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .Surface: 100A. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . #1 Pole Breakers. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. For Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Click OK. enter PP-2B.

23 In the Filter dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. For Panel Name.Loads. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. and for Category. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter LP-2B. Click OK. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . except without wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. select Wires. for Hot Conductors. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire.Loads. Click OK. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and for Category. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. enter 2. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 41 In the Filter dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Press ESC to end the command.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click (Open).

15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. expand Power. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Voltage. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and verify that Load.rvt. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. Rating. 2 In the drawing area. and Voltage Drop are selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. and then expand circuit 1. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Click OK. Distribution System. click Training Files.

26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 30 Close the System Browser. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. enter FR4. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. for Type Mark. click Edit Type. Click Tags. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Identity Data. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 47 In the drawing area.

and click Apply. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. For Circuit Number. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. Next you create a switch system. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Break. click Check None. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Deselect Break and for Suffix.rfa. enter a comma. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. for File Name. 56 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

click (Open). 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. under Electrical Lighting. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating a Switch System | 205 . for Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. click Training Files. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.

16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.Lighting. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and data systems. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Check None. Next you create a circuit and size wire. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. lighting. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 4 In the Filter dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt. click Training Files. and for Category. select Electrical Fixtures. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK.

14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 19 Click OK. under Electrical . Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 13 Select the wire again.Loads. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and click Element Properties. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.rfa. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2. select Wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. and click Open. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the drawing area. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.

click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area. in space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . select panel LP-2B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Finally. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.rvt. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. click Open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#12. Scroll down. Phase B 3636 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#10. Notice that the loads on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. enter 30A. for Rating. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and Phase C . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3712 VA. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Rebalance Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties.3616 VA). B. 6 Click OK. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.

The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i.Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.rvt. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. enter 25A. for Rating. under Electrical .Loads. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click (Open). 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 17 Close the warning dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Select PP-2B. and click OK.15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. under Electrical . Click OK. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. enter 30A. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

7 Select the schedule.Panel Schedules. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 6 In the Project Browser. select Bold and Italic. Under Body Text. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Close the report. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. for Font. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 1/8. for Font Size. click (Open). 5 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Edit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. and open E601 . under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Other. expand Sheets (all). 11 Click OK twice. Under Header Text. for Appearance. enter 3/32. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click Training Files.

Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Expand Unassigned. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Checking Your Design | 215 . 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the System Browser. press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 Close the details dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Electrical 214. 18 Select panel LP-2C. under Warnings. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. select MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 17 In the drawing area.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

In this lesson.Plumbing Plan . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. in addition to loading existing families. 4 In the Name dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. planning is critical to a successful design. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.Sanitary. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. 219 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Duplicate. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . right-click PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Adding a pipe size. type PVC .Vent. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Nominal. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Tee Vent .DWV. enter -4' . select Sanitary. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.Sch 40 . Tee. 18 For System Type. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 5/8''. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.PVC .Vent is listed. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 6 Click OK. and click Main. 25 For Outside. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 22 Click New Size. click Modify.DWV: Standard. click Training Files.Sch 40 .PVC . In the Project Browser. 27 For the new pipe size. enter 27/32''. select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings. 26 Click OK. 17 In the left pane.DWV: Standard. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Mechanical. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. and click OK. 21 In the right pane.rfa. enter 10°. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. For Offset. 10 On the Selection panel. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . for Material. 13 In the right panel.PVC . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select None. Cross. 15 For System Type. enter 1/2''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Tap. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. PVC . 24 For Inside Diameter. select Tee.Sch 40 . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog.0''. select Plastic. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. under Pipe Types.

221 . vent. add a hot water heater. sanitary piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.

as shown. you add 2 toilets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. including the men’s room (space Male 107). NOTE To identify a space name and number. click Training Files. 1 urinal. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and verify that Level 1 .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal. select Public . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 4 On the Element panel. as shown.Wall Mounted. and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. against the left wall.6 gpf. under Water Closet . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Flush Valve . in the Type Selector.1. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.

(Again. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. zoom in closer. and press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space.Wall Hung.

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 14 Click Modify. select 5''x5'' Strainer . In placing the fixture. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face.2'' Drain. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .

You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. In this exercise. and click View ➤ Piping. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. a urinal. and review the components listed under this system. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and a floor drain. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and Default Domestic Cold Water. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder.

Plumbing Plan . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design is open. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. clear Lines (<Overhead>). draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. You include the bathroom space number in the name. enter Sanitary 107. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser. expand Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 11 On the Options Bar. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. If you deselected the drain. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. for System Name. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

as shown. for example. select one of the components in the system. and click OK. The base is placed. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. a toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays.

You accept this suggested solution. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. enter -4'-0”. for Diameter. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Intersections. enter -1' 0''. for Offset. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 27 Click Modify. 24 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Solution Type. 25 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 23 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and modify it to meet project requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The default settings are automatically modified. enter -1' 0''. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Branch. for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Main.19 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. and for Offset. select 4''.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown.30 In the 3D view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Modify.

click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files.rvt. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 .Public. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel. select 22''x22'' .Rectangular.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. 8 Select the sink. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. enter 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. For example. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Press Esc. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 12 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 11 In the System Browser. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. use the ViewCube to orient the view.In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 22 In the plan view. 21 Select the tee.

In this example. 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar.6''. press Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Slope. enter 2' . the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Offset.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 .DWV. under Wye 45 Deg Double .

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view. enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. In the next steps. for Offset. zoom in to the double wye fitting. on the Options Bar.33 With the fitting selected. right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. double-click the section head to open the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 41 Using the same method. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify.

48 Click Modify. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. 49 Using the same method. 47 Move the cursor down. enter 6''. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Esc. press Spacebar.

under Trap P . 56 Using the same method.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select Standard. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 58 Using the same method.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and click Draw Pipe.. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. Click in the plan view. enter 6''. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and press Enter. connect the right sink to the double wye. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. under Pipe Types. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector.■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 62 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Training Files. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope. and verify the slope. click Finish.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.

under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Design. click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Sch 40 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. right-click the top connector.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard. 3 In the Section view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. select the elbow fitting on the right. as shown. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.PVC . and click to draw the pipe.DWV. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the vertical stack. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. 7 On the Selection panel.Design.Floor level line. 10 In the 3D view.Overall.Plumbing Plan . 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

17 In the Type Selector. 15 Press Esc. select Standard. for Offset. 12 Select the fitting. 14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.Sch 40 . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. as shown. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 18 In the plan view.PVC . enter 1'-0”. under Plug .11 Click Modify. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click the rotate control once.DWV.

A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.rvt.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

for System Type. click Check None. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 4 In the right pane. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Branch.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . expand Unassigned.Design ➤ 3D Views. 14 In the System Browser. if necessary. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. For Offset. select Domestic Hot Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that the value is 9' 0''.) 10 Click OK. urinal. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 15 In the plan view. select Main. 9 In the left pane. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Domestic Hot Water.Overall. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 7 In the left pane. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Cold Water. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and sinks. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and for System Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Branch. double-click 3D Plumbing . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click Main. minimize the Sanitary system. for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. and click OK. select Plumbing Fixtures. 6 In the left pane. For Offset. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. select Pipe Types: Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.

notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Edit System. For Flow Conversion Method. click Finish Editing System. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Notice that the water main displays in blue. enter DCW 107. 21 On the Edit System panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel.

28 In the Type Selector. connect the second toilet. enter 7''. for Offset. enter 10'. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. for Offset. 30 In the plan view. click to the left of the urinal. right-click the top DCW connector. select the sink above the urinal. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 0”/12”. 32 Move the cursor to the right. For Slope. under Pipe Types. as shown. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and press Enter.2 7/8''. 33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view. 35 In the Type Selector. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 3' . 31 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 4'0”. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and click the connector. For Offset. select Water.25 Using the same method. select 3/4''. at the intersection of the water main pipe. as shown. and click to place the pipe. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and click Draw Pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.

43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click OK.

44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Overall.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select the 3 sinks. 5 In the System Browser. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design is open. expand the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Cold Water. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 14 Click Modify. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 12 In the Type Selector. In later steps. select 0. and click OK. under Water Heater . Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. Default Domestic Hot Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).Tankless.6 Gallon.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 15 In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 10 In the System Browser. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 13 In the plan view. verify that DCW 107 is selected. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. and click Edit System. When designing systems.

Offset: 4' 6''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 Click Modify. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 22 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit System panel. as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. select the water heater. enter 10’. 26 Move the cursor to the right. and select Draw Pipe. 19 Select the water heater. for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . click Finish Editing System. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and click the water main line. Slope: 0''/12''. enter 1' 6''. 25 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. 24 Move the cursor up. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and for Offset. 33 On the Edit System panel. enter 1''. 30 On the System Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. as shown. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select 4'-6''. click Edit System. for Diameter. and in the System Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. for Offset.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. click Finish Editing System. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. enter 1' 6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 36 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and on the Placement Tools panel. enter 9' 0''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 35 On the Options Bar.

for Offset. 42 Click Modify. as shown. enter 2' 8''. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you can choose to save your work. You create a new pipe type. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. 2 Right-click Standard. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.rvt. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. However. and click Duplicate. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 267 .Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.autodesk. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In the next exercise. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). verify that 9' 0" is specified. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Carbon Steel. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that 9' 0" is selected. For Pipe Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Next. select Fire Protection Wet. duct. For Offset. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. and click Properties. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Fire Protection Wet. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. for Material. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. structural beams. However. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Pipe Type. click Rename. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 9 Click OK. In the left pane. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For System Type. select Main.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. and click Element Properties. click Add. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Fire Protection Plan . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 1. 5 Click OK twice. click Training Files.rvt. 6 In the drawing area. right-click.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Under Categories. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. 8 Using a crossing window. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Group parameter under. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select the upper half of the building. for Name.

and click OK. including a calculated value parameter. under Fire Protection. 13 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. click Training Files. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. select Zone 1. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. to which you add various parameters.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then access instance properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 2. and then click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 10 In the Filter dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Type of Parameter. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Light. 11 Click OK twice. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Feet and fractional inches. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. select Length. 14 Select the new header. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. for Name. 6 Using the same method. 10 In the Format dialog. select Maximum Spacing. For Units. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Spaces. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Click OK. and on the ribbon. and click Field Format. select To the nearest 1'. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Obstructed-Combustible. 7 Click OK. click the Formatting tab. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Schedule keys. For Key name. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Fire Protection. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. In the Maximum Spacing column. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Fire Protection Plan . double-click on each column separator. For Rounding. The schedule displays. For Group parameter under. enter Maximum Spacing. enter 15. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Add Parameter.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Available fields. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Click OK. Unobstructed Ordinary. select Spaces. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously.

This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Type. select Number. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Rounding. select Fixed. for Sort by. for Sorting/Grouping. and click OK. In the Fields dialog. select Level. click Edit. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click .■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Discipline. select 0 decimal place. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Units. select Sprinkler Zone. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Select Header and Blank line. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Formula. and click Field Format. Click OK. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 22 Click OK twice. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. and click View Properties. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Then by. under Other.

select Minimum Sprinklers. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. 30 Click OK twice. select Level. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Number. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. right-click the schedule. 27 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. and then select Hidden field. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level equals Level 2. and then click Field Format. and select Totals only. At the bottom of the dialog. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. for Filter. for Filter by. verify that Use default settings is selected. click Edit.

Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Fields. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and click View Properties. On the Formatting tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and Count. for Embedded Schedule. delete the word Maximum. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. click Edit. select Embedded Schedule. select Grand totals. for Available fields. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Count. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Calculate totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. System Name. under Other. double-click Type. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.

Unobstructed. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan Design. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Light. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. but their values are not determined. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. As a result. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select space 221 Instruction. 48 In the floor plan. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 52 Click OK. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Ordinary. 46 With the space still selected. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and access the instance properties.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 50 Access the instance properties. and click OK. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP . and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .autodesk. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and double-click Level 2 . After finishing each exercise. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. At the end of this tutorial. If the tutorial training files are not present. you will understand the process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. By following the recommended workflow. 279 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. As you create the system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.

When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser. After placing the initial sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Pendent . because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 10 Press Esc twice. as shown.

14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 14' 6".Design. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. you adjust the offset.FP_Ceiling view.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 25 Click OK. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Next. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. specify a vertical offset. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you place non-hosted sprinklers. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . This number is determined in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. Notice that the schedule updates. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 18 Type WT. 29 Press Esc. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 200B. under Constraints. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. 19 In the floor plan. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. For Number. and 200C). Adding Sprinklers | 283 . move the cursor to the right. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 11. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. enter 10' 6". click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. open Design ➤ FP . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.

you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 1 In the Project Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.Design is highlighted. and with piping (physical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . However. Unlike logical connections (systems).30 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the next exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.rvt. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In this exercise. click Training Files.

IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. within the Piping Systems folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. click View ➤ Systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. named Fire Protection Wet. Creating a Piping System | 285 .2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. as shown.

14 Click Finish Editing System. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. 15 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 19 Click OK. select an initial piping layout. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and number of elements in the system. and a piping layout preview displays. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. select Branch. 13 In the System Browser. 11 With the system still selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. enter FP Wet_Zone2. press Tab. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. system equipment. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and click Select. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and select the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Main is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Offset. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.Wet is selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. click Settings. In the left pane. For Pipe Type. verify that 9' 0" is specified. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. providing system editing tools.

and select solution 5. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). as shown. enter -12' 0". The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. In general. click Solutions. and green represents branch lines). the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Place Base. verify that Network is selected.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. When the layout is finished. 23 For Offset. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. for Diameter. select 2".

click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. as shown. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. A (parallel movement control) displays. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . the Connect Into tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. select a different layout solution. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 32 If necessary. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or that offset elevations are incorrect.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. click Training Files.Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If necessary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select the elbow fitting as shown. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. air terminals. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. radiators. you can select the pipe or duct. 14 Close the System Browser. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Layout. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. mechanical equipment. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. for Solution Type. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 18 Click Finish Editing System. and so on) are logically connected by a system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). verify that Network is selected. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and pipe or duct is created. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). click Add To System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. verify that Solutions is selected. 8 In the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 9 On the Edit System panel.

zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select 9'. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 21 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then press Esc. 25 Select the sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 24 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe. right-click. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then tile the views. 23 View the result in the 3D view. for Offset. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ 6 Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click on the section head to open the section view. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. select 4". for Diameter.

and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select 1 1/4". for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. and maximize the floor plan. 23 Close the 3D view. The pipe diameter is modified.

and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. You added tags to pipes. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet fire protection system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. If the view included detail graphics. 307 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. dependent views. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. click Training Files. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1. matchlines. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template.

as shown. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. more focused. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and click Apply Default View Template. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK. and click Rename. create dependent views for areas B and C. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.rvt. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. click Training Files. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 10 In the drawing area. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. views and put them on the sheet. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 9 Click OK. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.

select Double Dash 5/8". Creating Dependent Views | 309 . In the Color dialog. for Target view. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select 11. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. For Line Weight. and then press Esc. select black. 21 Using the same method. Click OK. on the Options Bar. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles./ ---). select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. click the current value.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. For Line Pattern.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 25 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.

click Training Files. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. For Sub-Discipline. The section crop lines no longer display. Under Graphics. For Default View Template. right-click 3D Plumbing. 4 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. enter Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing Isometric.Domestic Water. 6 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Documentation. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. for View Classification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and select the section box. select Plumbing. Click OK.rvt. and click Properties. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Apply Default View Template.Domestic Water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for View Name. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 2 Zoom in. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

select Dash. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select 3. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and then click OK. press Tab 3 times. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 14 Right-click.

and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Sanitary Waste. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Domestic Water view with detailing. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and click to select it. 18 Using methods learned previously. In the drawing area. press Tab 3 times. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Right-click.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

verify that Common is selected. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Creating Callout Views | 315 . click on the Format value. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. select To the nearest 1/8". as shown. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. In the Format dialog. For Slope. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 21 Click OK twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 25 Press Esc twice.

6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. for Scale. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

for Line Weight. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. drag it to the sheet. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. under Sheets (all).8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. using the same method. double-click M601 . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. For Title on Sheet. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for View Name. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

right-click the detail view. and click OK. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. under Names. and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 8 With the text still selected. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Creating Annotations In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.

verify that Leader is cleared. 15 On the Options Bar. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and then click Right Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.9 Press Esc twice. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a segment of round duct. a return diffuser. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

If necessary. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. under Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click OK. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.rfa. for Ducts. clear Leader. 20 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.

32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.25 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select Horizontal. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End. Creating Annotations | 325 . 31 On the Options Bar. Leader. as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar.

select the last tag placed. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select Dot Open 1/16". 41 Close the file with or without saving it. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. you use temporary dimensions to locate.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions | 327 . for Leader Arrowhead. and all elements of that type are affected. and lock lighting fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 37 In the drawing area. not simply an instance property. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. click Training Files. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. On the Options Bar. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 12 Press Esc. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.

and notes. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and offset them 8' from the wall. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . linework. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend In this exercise. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend | 329 . lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.13 Using the same method. 16 Press Esc. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.3 1/2"). annotation symbols. enter 8'. 19 Using the same methods. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.

2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For Scale. select Floor Plan.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View. enter Diffuser Legend.rvt. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Using the same method.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.8 Neck. Click OK. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. select 1/4" = 1' -0". and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. click below the title to place the diffuser. ■ 9 In the drawing area.

click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 331 .

select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 26 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Press Esc.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. enter E.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 333 .

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 335 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.rvt. A drafting view using detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A detail callout that references another view. detail groups.

and click to place it. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. place Power Riser . 8 Using the same method. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.113 East on the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and then modify and align the views.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Next. select each of the 2 panelboards. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and click OK. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. select the 113 North view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click. for Title on Sheet. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View.9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .

21 Using the drag control. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. you add wiring to the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Activate View. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 22 Press Esc. right-click. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the next exercise. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Level 1 line. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

In the Line Styles dialog. for Line Weight. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . As you draw. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. click New. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the New Subcategory dialog. for Name. notice that there are no snaps active. click Training Files. as shown. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 8 On the Options Bar.113 North view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK.rvt. 2 Close the Project Browser. select 6. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Chain is selected. enter Electrical Power. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. expand Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Under Modify Subcategories. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).

as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method.

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. 28 Click above the cap. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 On the Options Bar.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and press Enter. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 0 0. You enter exact values for each line length. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.5.36 Press Esc. 40 Press Esc.

for Name. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. expand Groups ➤ Detail. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. while pressing Ctrl. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. click on the length dimension value. and click OK. 47 In the drawing area. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and then press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser.25. enter Ground. you can ensure that they stay together. Press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and press Enter.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter 0 0. select all 3 lines.125. 50 With the group selected. Using the same method.

54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously.

2 Right-click the copy. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and will place it on sheet E01. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In later exercises. for Name. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and click OK. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Back.6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

select 3D Views. and click Apply View Template. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Under Names. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Walkthroughs.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Typical.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). (Right). 19 Complete the text labels. 15 Using the same method. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor down and to the left. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.

select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and under Extents. and then click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.To rotate and reposition a text label. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 25 Click OK. 23 Click on the crop region. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Click OK. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click the view name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View.29 In the drawing area. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select the isometric view. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". click Training Files. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. Click OK. 12 On the Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 Zoom in to the component. as the rectangle start point. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. for Sub-Discipline. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 13 In the drawing area. For View Classification. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Documentation. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).

select C.I. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 20 Select 1. (Line). click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 21 In the drawing area. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and click OK. 18 With the filled region still selected. 22 Click Modify. 23 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Concrete. for Type. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.P. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. 34 Press Esc. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. select Multiple.28 Click Modify. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

as shown. (Rectangle). 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. as shown.D. 49 Click Modify. and click OK.

58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 61 Using the same method. as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

72 If necessary. 67 On the Options Bar. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 71 Click Modify. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. as shown. and then click OK. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.

and click to specify the text insertion point. 80 Press Esc twice. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the second leader point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 76 To select the leader start point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. and click to place it. 90 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

For Import units. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Auto-Detect. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Colors. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select Black and White. Click OK. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Layers.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg. For A-----NPP. for Line Weight. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. select Visible. select 3. Click Open.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. click Training Files. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. you import a CAD detail drawing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area. open P103 . and then press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc.8 Type ZF. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful